Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning lights and chimes 10
Gauges 13
Entertainment Systems 16
How to get going 16
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD 20
Auxiliary input jack 26
Satellite radio information 30
Climate Controls 34
Automatic temperature control 34
Rear window defroster 37
Lights 38
Headlamps 38
Turn signal control 41
Bulb replacement 42
Driver Controls 48
Windshield wiper/washer control 48
Steering wheel adjustment 48
Power windows 53
Mirrors 56
Speed control 58
Message center 66
Tailgate 75
Locks and Security 78
Keys 78
Locks 78
Anti-theft system 89
Table of Contents
1
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints 92
Seating 92
Safety restraints 97
Airbags 112
Child restraints 120
Tires, Wheels and Loading 133
Tire information 135
Tire inflation 137
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 150
Vehicle loading 154
Trailer towing 160
Recreational towing 165
Driving 166
Starting 166
Brakes 169
Traction Control™ 171
Transmission operation 173
Roadside Emergencies 189
Getting roadside assistance 189
Hazard flasher switch 191
Fuel pump shut-off switch 191
Fuses and relays 192
Changing tires 199
Lug nut torque 206
Jump starting 206
Wrecker towing 212
Customer Assistance 213
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 219
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 219
Cleaning 220
Table of Contents
2
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications 227
Engine compartment 229
Engine oil 231
Battery 234
Engine coolant 236
Fuel information 242
Air filter(s) 257
Part numbers 258
Maintenance product specifications and capacities 259
Engine data 262
Accessories 265
Index 267
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2006 Ford Motor Company
Table of Contents
3
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
4
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer. Additionally, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a
trailer, do not drive over 70 mph (112 km/h) and do not make starts at
full throttle. This style of driving will help the engine and other parts of
your vehicle break in at the heavier loads. For more detailed information
about towing a trailer, refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
5
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
6
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
7
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
8
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Emission System Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
9
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service
engine soon⬙ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
10
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position.
If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek
service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake
system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized
dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental
restraint system has been detected.
P!
BRAKE
ABS
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
11
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A BeltMinder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and safety restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the BeltMinder威 chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains ON at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON,
have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more
information on this system, refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Overdrive off: Illuminates when
the overdrive function of the
transmission has been turned off,
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Traction Control娂 : Illuminates
when the Traction Control娂 is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for
more information.
Four wheel drive low: Illuminates
when four-wheel drive low is
engaged.
O/D
OFF
4x4
LOW
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
12
Four wheel drive high: Illuminates
when four-wheel drive high is
engaged.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
GAUGES
4x4 HI
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
13
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle. Refer to
Message Center in the Driver
Controls chapter on how to switch
the display from Metric to English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press and release the message
center INFO button until TRIP
mode appears in the display. Press
the RESET button to reset.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
14
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates
the battery voltage when the
ignition is in the ON position. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range, have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
by your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow next to the fuel pump
icon indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
For more information, refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
15
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Quick start — How to get going
Listening to the radio
1. If the audio system is off, press
VOL-PUSH to turn the radio on.
Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press AM/FM repeatedly to
choose between AM/FM1/FM2
frequency bands.
3. Press
/ to manually go up/down the frequency band.
Press
SEEK to search
down/up the chosen frequency band
for the next strongest station.
To disengage SEEK mode, press
/ .
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired station, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
station. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
stations in each frequency band — six in AM, six in FM1 and six in FM2.
To access your saved stations, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the station frequency will appear on the
display.
Listening to satellite radio (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
16
2. Press AUX repeatedly to cycle
through auxiliary audio sources.
Select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 to listen
to satellite radio.
3. Press
SEEK, SEEK to
access the previous or next satellite
channel.
You may also seek by music
category. For further information, refer to CATEGORY listing under the
MENU control on your specific audio system.
4. Once you are tuned to the
desired channel, press and hold a
memory preset (1–6) to save the
channel. PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will
return signifying the station has been saved. You can save up to six
channels in each — six in SAT1, six in SAT2, and six in SAT3.
To access your saved channels, press the corresponding memory preset.
The memory preset # and the channel name will appear on the display.
Listening to a CD/MP3 (if equipped)
1. If the audio system is turned off,
press VOL-PUSH to turn the radio
on. Turn VOL-PUSH to adjust the
volume.
Note: The system may take a few
moments to turn on.
2. Press CD to enter CD mode. If a
disc is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
For a single CD system, if a disc
is not already loaded, insert only
one, label side up into the CD slot.
LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display. The first
track on the disc will begin playing.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
17
For an in-dash six CD system, if
a disc is not already loaded, press
LOAD. Select a slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When the
display reads LOAD CD#, load the
desired disc, label side up. If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds,
the system will choose for you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to
play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for
further information.
3. In CD/MP3 mode, you can access the following features:
Press
SEEK, SEEK to
access the previous/next tracks.
Press and hold REW to manually
reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
Press and hold FF to manually
advance in a CD/MP3 track.
Press
FOLDER to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
Press FOLDER
to access the
next folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage
shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random play. Otherwise,
random play will begin when the current track is finished playing. CD
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
18
SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
Press
/ (play/pause) when a
CD/MP3 is playing to pause the disc.
CD PAUSE will appear in the
display. Press again to resume play.
4. For a single cd system,
press
to eject the current disc.
The display will read CD EJECT.
For an in-dash six CD system, press
. Select the correct slot
number using memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the
disc and the display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in
15 seconds, the system will reload the disc.
To auto eject up to 6 discs, press and hold
until the system
begins ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system
will reload the discs.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
19
Audiophile in-dash six CD/MP3/satellite compatible sound system
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the window switches and audio system for up to
ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is
opened.
1.
/ (Tune/Disc selector):
In radio mode, press to manually
go up (
) or down ( )the
radio frequency. Press and hold for
a fast advance through radio frequencies.
In menu mode, use to select various settings.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the desired disc
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2. MUTE/
: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
20
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
CATEGORY (satellite radio if equipped): Press MENU until the
currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY MODE). In
CATEGORY MODE, press
/ to scroll through the list of available
Sirius channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press
SEEK
or SCAN to select the category. After a category is selected, press SEEK
to search for that specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). To
select a different category, press MENU until the category appears in the
display. Press
/ to select a different category. You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Setting the clock: Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is
displayed. Press
/ / SEEK to adjust the hours/minutes.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use
/ /
SEEK, SEEK to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
the display. Use
/ / SEEK to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When
RBDS is OFF, you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations
or view the station name or type.
To search for specific RBDS music categories: Press MENU
repeatedly until a music category appears in the display. Press
/
to find the desired type. Then press SEEK, SEEK or SCAN to
begin the search.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYZ, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use
/ /
SEEK, SEEK to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting.
Use
/ / SEEK, SEEK to adjust.
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting.
Use
/ / SEEK, SEEK to adjust the audio between the left
(L) and right (R) speakers.
FADE: Press MENU to reach the fade setting. Use
/ /
SEEK, SEEK to adjust the audio between the back (B) and
front (F) speakers.
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode):: Press MENU repeatedly to access.
Press
/ / SEEK to optimize sound for ALL SEATS,
DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
SPEEDVOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use
/ / SEEK, SEEK to adjust.
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Track/Folder Mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode. In Track
Mode, pressing
SEEK, SEEK will scroll through all tracks on the
disc. In Folder mode, pressing
SEEK, SEEK will scroll only
through tracks within the selected folder.
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
/ /
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
22
SEEK, SEEK to toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON, the
system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through FES/DVD (if equipped),
LINE IN (Auxiliary audio mode),
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes (Satellite Radio if equipped).
For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode, refer
to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
5. SEEK: In radio mode, press
/ to access the
previous/next strong station.
In CD mode, press
/ to
access the previous/next CD track.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK, SEEK to
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press
SEEK, SEEK to seek to the
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
In TEXT MODE, press
SEEK, SEEK to view the
previous/additional display text.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
SEEK, SEEK to select a category.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
6.
(Play/Pause): This control
is operational in CD mode. When a
CD is playing, press to pause or play
the current CD. The CD status will display in the radio display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System (FES)
please refer to the DVD supplement for further information.
7. SHUFFLE: IIn CD/MP3 mode,
press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle
mode. SHUFFLE ON will appear in
the display. If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK
to begin random play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
23
current track is finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display. To
disengage, press SHUFFLE again. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the
display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
8. FOLDER
: Press
FOLDER
to access next folder
on MP3 discs, if available.
9.
FOLDER: Press FOLDER
to access the previous folder on
MP3 discs, if available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset control until sound returns. You may store up to
six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold to
hear a brief sampling of radio
stations or CD tracks.
In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name,
and disc title and file name (if available).
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
24
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the
additional display text. When the “>” indicator is active, press
SEEK
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop.
In CATEGORY MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of channels
in the selected category. Press again to stop.Satellite radio is available
only with a valid SIRIUS subscription. Check with your authorized
dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note: If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last.
17. LOAD: Toloadadiscintothe
system, press LOAD. Select a slot
number using memory presets 1–6.
When the display reads LOAD CD#,
load the desired disc, label side up.
If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds, the system will choose for
you. Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to 6 discs, press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Note: An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 (folder #) T001 (track #)
in the display. An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 (track#) in
the display. Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for
further information.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
25
18. (CD eject): To eject a disc
from the system, press
. Select
the correct slot number using
memory presets 1–6. When ready, the system will eject the disc and the
display will read REMOVE CD. If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds,
the system will reload the disc.
To auto eject up to 6 CDs, press and hold
until the system begins
ejecting all loaded discs. If the discs are not removed, the system will
reload the discs.
19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up.
Auxiliary input jack
Your vehicle is equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ), located in
the instrument panel tray. The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to
connect your portable music player to the in-vehicle audio system. This
allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the
vehicle speakers with high fidelity. To achieve optimal performance,
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
26
please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable
music device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
27
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
28
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Dirty, warped
or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch
protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to T255.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
29
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
11
2
.mp3
2
.mp3
3
.mp3
3
4
.mp3
64
.mp3
7
.mp3
.doc
.ppt
.xls
5
.mp3
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
30
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels
over the internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
31
Radio Display Condition Action Required
ACQUIRING Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
SAT FAULT Internal module or
system failure present.
If this message does not
clear within a short period
of time, or with an
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a fault.
See your authorized
dealer for service.
INVALID CHNL Channel no longer
available.
This previously available
channel is no longer
available. Tune to another
channel. If the channel
was one of your presets,
you may choose another
channel for that preset
button.
UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the channel
or tune to another
channel.
NO TEXT Artist information not
available.
Artist information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system
is working properly.
NO TEXT Song title information
not available.
Song title information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system
is working properly.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
32
Radio Display Condition Action Required
NO TEXT Category information not
available.
Category information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system
is working properly.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to the
vehicle antenna.
You are in a location that
is blocking the SIRIUS
signal (i.e., tunnel, under
an overpass, dense
foliage, etc). The system
is working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES). Refer to the DVD Supplement Guide for further information on
your system.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System. Refer to the
Navigation supplement for further information.
Note: The navigation system, which may be available on your vehicle, is
not equipped with THX威 .
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
33
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) SYSTEM WITH
HEATED SEATS
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius
using the message center, refer to Units (Fahrenheit/Celsius) in the
Driver Controls chapter.
MAX A/C: For maximum cooling performance, press
, A/C, ,
and set the temperature to 60° F (16° C) and the highest blower setting.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
34
1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and
thin ice. To exit
select another mode.
2.
Fan speed control: Press to manually increase or decrease the
fan speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
3. A.
R
Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to
Rear window defroster in this section for more information. If your
vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors, the
same button will activate both.
3. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate. This
feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
4.
Passenger heated seat control: Press to heat the passenger
seat. Press once to activate high heat (two indicator lights). Press again
to activate low heat (one indicator light). Press again to deactivate the
passenger heated seat.
5.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts.
6.
: Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts.
7.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts.
8.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console
registers.
9.
Driver heated seat control: Press to heat the driver seat. Press
once to activate high heat (two indicator lights). Press again to activate
low heat (one indicator light). Press again to deactivate the driver
heated seat.
10. Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
11.
Recirculation control: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
engaged manually in any other airflow selection except
(defrost).
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except
MAX A/C.
12. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO,
(defrost) and (floor/defrost).
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
35
13. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
14. Temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the temperature
in the vehicle cabin.
15. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
airflow selector in the OFF or with
(recirculated air) engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
• For maximum cooling performance (Max A/C):
In AUTO : Press AUTO control and set to desired temperature.
In Manual Override Control: Press the
(panel), A/C, and
(recirculation) controls, set the temperature to 60°F and the fan to the
highest blower setting.
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
36
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to defrost your rear windshield from fog and thin ice. If equipped,
it also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and thin ice from the
side mirrors.
Ensure that the ignition is in the ON position. Press to turn the defroster
ON/OFF. The indicator light will illuminate when activated.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
37
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control
clockwise to the first position
to
turn on the parking lamps. Rotate
clockwise to the second
position
to also turn on the
headlamps.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system will allow you
to keep the headlamps on for 0–180
seconds, after the ignition switch is
turned to OFF. See Message Center
in the Driver Controls chapter.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control counterclockwise to
.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to
.
Foglamp control
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
control is in the
, or
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light
will illuminate if
the ignition is in the ON position.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
38
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
In order for the DRLs to function:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control is in the OFF, parking lamp or autolamp
position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
39
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Move the control to the full down
position, past detent, to prevent the
interior lights from illuminating when the doors are opened.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works
well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
40
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then usea4mm
socket/wrench to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to adjust
down) or clockwise (to adjust up)
aligning the upper edge of the light
pattern up to the horizontal line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
41
INTERIOR LAMPS
Map lamps
To turn on the map lamps, press the
control next to each lamp.
Rear map lamp (if equipped)
The rear map lamp lights are
located on the end of the overhead
rail system. The lamps can be
turned on or off by pushing on the
lens.
Courtesy/reading/cargo lamps (if equipped)
The dome portion of the lamp, the
center light, can be turned on when
the panel dimmer control is rotated
fully up or when any door is
opened.
With the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position, the rear dome lamp
can be turned ON or OFF by sliding
the control.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
42
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of
bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps 2 H13/ 9008
Front park/turn lamps 2 3157A (amber)
Front sidemarker 2 194
Foglamps 2 9140
Backup lamp 2 3156K
Rear stop/turn/sidemarker/tail
lamp
2 3457 K
High-mount brakelamp 1 921
Cargo lamp 2 921
Map lamp 2 906
Rear dome lamp 1 921
License plate lamp 2 194
Exterior mounted mirror turn
signal indicator
2 See your dealer
Puddle lamp 2 See your dealer
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
43
2. At the top and inboard side of the
headlamp, peel the protective cover
back from the lower screws and
loosen the three retaining screws.
3. Once the three retaining screws
have been removed, disengage the
tab at the top center of the
headlamp assembly by lifting it up.
4. Slide headlamp assembly forward
disconnecting the snap attachment
at the fender and disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by
pulling rearward.
5. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it
straight out.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
44
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the OFF position and open the
hood.
2. At the top and inboard side of the
headlamp, peel the protective cover
back from the lower screws and
loosen the three retaining screws.
3. Once the three retaining screws
have been removed, disengage the
tab at the top center of the
headlamp assembly by lifting it up.
4. Slide the headlamp assembly
forward disconnecting the snap
attachment at the fender.
5. Remove bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and then pull the
bulb straight out.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing tail/brake/turn signal/backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the OFF position.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assembly screws and remove
the two screws from the tail lamp
assembly.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
45
3. Carefully pull the lamp assembly
straight rearward from the tailgate
pillar to disengage two hidden
snap-in retainers.
4. Remove bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket
and press in the new bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing high-mount brake and cargo lamp bulbs
Make sure the headlamp control is
in the OFF position.
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
vehicle to expose the bulb sockets.
2. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating counterclockwise and
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order.
Replacing foglamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the OFF position.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
foglamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the foglamp bulb.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator lamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
46
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
47
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
TILT STEERING
Push the lever down to unlock the
steering column. While the lever is
in the down position, tilt the
steering column to the desired
position.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
48
While holding the steering wheel,
pull the lever up to its original
position to lock the steering column.
Never adjust the steering
column when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
CENTER CONSOLE
The center console offers several useful storage features. These include:
1. Cupholders
2. Tissue holder in lid
3. Power point
4. Large utility compartment has
Coin holder slots, PalmPilot娂/PDA
holder, and Pen holder
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package. The overhead console can come on rails, which can
1
2
3
4
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
49
be removed by the customer, or it can come as a non-rail component of
the headliner, which cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a overhead console rail system, there are
several features that can be operated.
1. To open the bins, move the
center latch forward which will
allow the door to be opened.
2. The latches on the side of the
bins are to enable the user to
remove the bin or add a dealer
purchased feature.
Sliding the bins on the rails may
cause damage to the headliner.
The removable bins are to be
snapped into place not slid.
Overhead Storage Bins
• When on the overhead rail, adjacent bins must be pinned together.
Bins adjacent to the End Cap must be pinned to the End Cap. Bins
without pin attachments should not be placed on the overhead rail.
Failure to pin the bins together can allow the bins to become
separated from the rail under certain conditions.
Bin Removal
Attach and remove bins from the rail using the following instructions:
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
50
Place both palms on the underside of the storage bin, avoiding the
storage bin door.
Push upwards with palms.
While pushing upwards with palms, grip the side latches with fingers and
squeeze.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
51
With pressure applied with palms and side latches squeezed down, pull
downward on the entire storage bin and remove.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
on the instrument panel.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power point longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
52
An additional auxiliary power point
is located on the lower rear side of
the center console. The power point
is accessible from the rear seats.
Always keep the power point caps
closed when not being used.
Cigarette/Cigar lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your
hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and
socket. The lighter will be released
from its heating position when it is
ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Ashtray
The ashtray is located on the
instrument panel.
To open ashtray, push in on the
door and release. The ashtray
assembly will tip out. To close, push
assembly in completely and release.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
53
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
the bottom part of the rocker switch
and release quickly. Press the rocker
switch again to stop.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control.
Note: The rear window switches will not illuminate when the window
control is in the LOCKED position.
Press the right side to restore the window controls.
Power Sliding Back Window
To operate the power sliding back window, the ignition switch must be in
the Run or Accessory position.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
54
• Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open window
all the way to the full open
position.
• Press and hold the top part of the
rocker switch to close the
window.
When operating the power sliding back window you must ensure
all rear seat occupants and/or cargo are not in the proximity of
the back window.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power sliding back window. They may
seriously injure themselves.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until
the driver’s door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DIMMING INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
Your vehicle is equipped with an
inside rear view mirror and an
outside driver’s side mirror with an
auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high
reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state when bright lights
(glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from
behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize
glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror
since this may impair proper mirror performance.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
55
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
lock mirrors in place.
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully
before driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
WIth powerfold mirrors, you can
fold the side mirrors using the
power mirror switch.
1. Rotate the switch to the
center/neutral position.
2. Momentarily pull the switch
rearward to auto fold in.
3. Momentarily pull the switch
rearward again to fold back to
design position.
The powerfold mirrors may be moved inward/outward manually, however,
if a mirror is moved manually, it will need to be reset. To reset: with the
switch in the center position, momentarily pull the switch rearward to
fold the mirrors in. An audible ⬙click⬙ will be heard indicating
re-synchronization. If the click is not heard, use the switch to fold the
mirrors out, then in, until the click is heard. After that, the mirrors will
operate to their normal positions until they are again moved manually.
Note: Ten or more switch activations within 1 minute, or repeated
folding/unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during
the full travel may cause the system to disable the fold/unfold function to
protect motors from overheating. Should this occur, wait approximately 3
minutes for the system to reset and function to return to normal.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
56
Heated outside mirrors
Heated mirrors remove ice, mist and
fog. To activate the heated mirrors,
press the rear defrost button
R
located on the climate control panel.
Refer to Rear window defrost in
the Climate Controls chapter for
more information.
On vehicles not equipped with rear
defrost, press the heated mirror
control located on the climate
control panel, refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for more information.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator
When the vehicle turn signal is
activated, the lower portion of the
mirror housing will blink.
This feature provides an indicator to
the driver that the vehicle turn
signal is working properly.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the bottom of the control to
adjust the pedals toward you.
• Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 3 inches (76 mm) of maximum
travel.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
57
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET control and release
it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The indicator
light on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
58
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RESUME control will
not work if the vehicle speed is not
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control
to operate the Tap-Up function.
Press and release this control to
increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the CST (coast)
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the CST
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
59
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET control.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will not erase your vehicle’s previously
set speed, if RESUME is then selected, the vehicle will return to the
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control. This will erase your
vehicle’s previously set speed.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Audio control features
Press
to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2 (if equipped)
• CD (if equipped)
• FES/DVD (if equipped)
• AUX (IN LINE) (if equipped)
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode if equipped).
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:
• Press and release SEEK to select the next preset station or press and
hold SEEK to select the next strong station within the selected radio
band.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
60
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped):
• Press and release SEEK to advance through preset channels or press
and hold SEEK to increment to the next subscribed channel.
In CD mode:
• Press and release SEEK to select the next track selection on the CD
or press and hold SEEK to fast forward in the current track selection.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or − to adjust
volume.
Climate control features
Press TEMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
Press FAN + or - to adjust fan
speed.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
61
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.
Note: The moon roof will open to the “comfort” position first before
opening all the way. The “comfort” position helps to alleviate rumbling
wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened.
To open the moon roof: The moon
roof is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Press and release
the
control. The moon roof
will open to the “comfort” position.
Press and release the control again
to fully open. To stop the one-touch
open feature press either the
or control again.
To close the moon roof: The
moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express closing
feature. Press and release the
front portion of the control. To stop
motion at any time during the one-touch closing, press the control again.
To vent the moon roof: Press and hold the
control. The moon
roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the
vent position. To close, press and hold the
control until the glass
panel stops moving.
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
ROOF
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
62
When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威.Itis
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat Step 1
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink威 buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink威.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
63
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until Step 4 has
been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
Step 3 with procedures noted in the
“Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian
residents.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the indicator light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light
indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency
signals.)
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button and observe the
indicator light. If the light is constant, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
begin with Step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat Step 1.
Note: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a continuous red, proceed with Steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink威 button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
64
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace Step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 4 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
65
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
2inthe“Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
MESSAGE CENTER
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status preceded
by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential
vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long
indicator chime. If equipped with an outside temperature display, it will
display in the instrument cluster all the time, except when a warning
message is present.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
66
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer/Compass
• Trip odometer/Odometer/Compass
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Compass display
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
67
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
3. Start the engine.
4. From Info menu, select the
Compass/Odometer function. (Do
not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The
top of the message center must be
blank).
5. Press and hold the SETUP and
RESET controls until the message
center display changes to show the
current zone setting (XX).
6. Press the RESET, then press
SETUP control repeatedly until the
correct zone setting for your
geographic location is displayed on
the message center. The range of
zone values are from 01 to 15 and “wraps” back to 01.
7. To exit the zone setting mode,
and to “lock in” your change, press
and release the RESET control.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED. It will take
up to five circles to complete calibration.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
68
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100
km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for
one second when you have approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If
you RESET this warning message, this display and tone will return
within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
69
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolock
• Autolamp Delay
• Language
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for three seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. FUEL LEVEL
2. ENGINE TEMP
3. OIL PRESSURE
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
70
4. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
5. CHARGING SYSTEM
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Autolocks
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolocks ON or OFF.
Autolamp delay
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the new Autolamp delay values of >0, >10, >20, >30, >60, >90, >120 or
>180.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
71
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control to set the language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
72
Warning display Status
Door ajar Warning can be reset
Low fuel level Warning returns after 10 minutes
Check charging system
Check traction control娂
Low brake fluid level
Low oil pressure
Check engine temperature
Reduced engine power
Stop engine safely
Check fuel cap Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from OFF to ON.
Transmission malfunction
Low tire pressure
Tire pressure monitor fault
Tire pressure sensor fault
Engine failsafe mode
DOOR AJAR. Displayed when a door is not completely closed.
TRANSMISSION MALFUNCTION. Displayed when the transmission is
not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine
coolant is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn
off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER. Displayed when the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
STOP ENGINE SAFELY. Displayed when the engine is overheating.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
73
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM. Displayed when the electrical system is
not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical accessories
when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes on
when the engine is operating at normal speeds, have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible.
CHECK TRACTION CONTROL娂. Displayed when the Traction
Control娂 system is not operating properly. If this message is displayed
on the message center the Traction Control娂 system will be partially
operable. If this warning stays on, contact your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible. For further information, refer to Traction
control娂 in the Driving chapter.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
LOW OIL PRESSURE. Displayed when the engine oil pressure is low. If
this warning message is displayed, check the level of the engine oil.
Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
information about adding engine oil. If the oil level is OK and this
warning persists, shut down the engine immediately and contact your
authorized dealer for service.
CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel
filler cap under the Fuel Information section in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE. Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
74
ENGINE FAILSAFE MODE. Displayed when the engine has defaulted
to a ’limp-home’ operation. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
DATA ERR. These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle
network communication between electronic modules.
• Fuel computer
• Charging system
• Autolamp delay
• Auto locks
• Brake fluid
• Compass
• Outside temperature
• Engine sensor
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible if these messages
occur on a regular basis.
TAILGATE LOCK
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
• Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
• Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
75
Tailgate removal
Your tailgate is removable to allow
more room for loading.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Use a screwdriver to pry the
spring clip (on each connector) past
the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
3. Disconnect the other cable.
4. Lift tailgate to a 45–degree angle
from horizontal.
5. Lift right side off of its hinge.
6. Lift tailgate to a 80–degree angle from horizontal.
7. Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
BEDRAILS (IF EQUIPPED)
• This bedrail is for appearance use only.
To help prevent injury, do not use bedrail to retain cargo.
• Retain cargo with the pickup tiedown hooks.
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend
the pickup box for larger loads.
To extend the bed extender:
1. Lower tailgate.
2. Pull the lever on each side of the
bed extender to release it from the
pickup box.
3. Lift the bed extender over on to
the tailgate.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
76
4. Evenly push down on the bed
extender and push the lever in on
each side locking it in place.
To stow the bed extender, follow
steps one through four in reverse
order.
The bed extender may be used to
secure a load of up to 100 lb. (46
kg) on the tailgate.
The bed extender should always
be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not
in use.
Activating bed extender Theft
Deterrent Device:
The following procedure can be
done with the bed extender in the
stowed or extended position.
1. Locate the Phillips head screw in
the middle of the vertical brace on
the locking clip.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise
until you hear an audible click.
3. To deactivate, turn the screw clockwise until the locking clip moves
freely.
To remove the bed extender:
1. Extend the bed extender.
2. Pull the lever on each side of the
bed extender to unlock it.
Make sure the locking clip screws
are loose before removing the bed
extender.
3. Press the locking clips below the
middle bar and lift the bed extender
out of the channels on the “D” pillar.
To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
77
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
Refer to the SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system section in this
chapter for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock controls are located on the driver and front
passenger door panels.
Press control to unlock all vehicle doors.
Press control to lock all vehicle
doors.
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature helps
prevent you from locking yourself
out of your vehicle.
With the key in any ignition
position:
• The driver’s door will
automatically unlock if it is locked
by the driver’s power lock control
while the driver’s door is open.
The vehicle may still be locked with
the key in the ignition, and performing one of the following actions:
• Pressing the manual lock button on the door.
• Operating the remote entry transmitter.
• Operating the keyless entry keypad.
• Operating the driver’s door with a key.
Autolock
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position,
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
78
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the brake pedal is released and the vehicle attains a speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (ON)
position, and
• the brake pedal is released and the vehicle attains a speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature activated. There are four
methods to enable/disable this feature: One is through your authorized
dealer, the second with a power door unlock/lock sequence, the third
with the keypad, and the fourth using the message center.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, unlock all
doors using the power door lock/unlock control and ensure all vehicle
doors are closed.
Power door unlock/lock procedure
You must complete Steps 1–5 within
30 seconds, or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the
procedure needs to be repeated,
you must wait a minimum of 30
seconds to begin again.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON)
position, then press the
control
three times.
2. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, then press the
control three times.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position; the horn will chirp to
indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated.
4. Within five seconds, press
then the control. Note: One horn
chirp should be heard, indicating the system has been disabled.
Conversely, a horn chirp followed by a honk will indicate the system is
enabled. Pressing the
control then the control will turn the
feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON. The
horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short
chirp and one long honk) if autolock was activated.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
79
5. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to exit programming.
Note: After exiting the driver configuration mode, the horn will chirp
once to indicate a feature has been activated/deactivated.
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter 5–digit entry code
4. Press and hold the 7 • 8. While holding the 7 • 8pressthe3• 4.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
6. Release the 7 • 8.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Message center procedure
For information regarding the activation and deactivation of the
autolocks feature, refer to Message center (SETUP button) in the
Driver Controls chapter.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock.
• Move control down to disengage childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
80
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
doors.
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors. The parklamps will flash.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn
will chirp once, and the parklamps will flash once more.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
81
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps and the parklamps will not flash.
Power door lock/unlock disable feature
The
(lock) and (unlock) features on your power door locks will
not work from inside the vehicle when:
• the ignition has been turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, and
• 20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using
the remote entry transmitter, the keyless entry pad, or the power door
lock control (while the accompanying door is open).
The
(lock) and (unlock) features will work again after:
• a door has become ajar,
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position, or
• using the UNLOCK
control on your remote entry transmitter or
unlocking via the keyless entry keypad.
Deactivating/activating power door lock/unlock disable feature
All vehicle doors must be closed before beginning the procedure. You
must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds, or the procedure will have
to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait a
minimum of 30 seconds to begin again.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position, then press the
button
three times.
2. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, then press the
button three times.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position; the horn will chirp to
indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated.
4. Within five seconds, press the
control two times. Note: Two horn
chirps should be heard, indicating the system has been disabled.
Conversely, two horn chirps followed by a honk will indicate the system
is enabled. Pressing the power door
button two times again will turn
the feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON.
Every two consecutive presses of the
button after successfully
entering the configuration mode will change the enable/disable condition
of the feature.
5. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to exit programming.
Note: After exiting the driver configuration mode, the horn will chirp
once to indicate a feature has been activated/deactivated.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
82
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to 2
(ACCESSORY) or 3 (ON) to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
Memory feature
The remote entry system can also control the memory feature.
Press the
control once to unlock the driver’s door. Pressing the
control will automatically move the seat, adjustable pedals and power
mirrors to the desired memory position (the memory position
corresponds to the transmitter being used).
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, adjustable pedals, and power mirrors to the
positions you desire.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s seat.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press one
control on the remote transmitter
and then press the 1 or 2 control on
the driver’s seat to which you would
like to associate with Driver 1 or
Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
remote transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door seat.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on
the driver’s seat.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
83
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it
from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle:
• Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your authorized dealer for
programming, or
• Perform the programming procedure yourself.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
84
Programming remote transmitters
It is necessary to have all (maximum of six — original and/or new) of
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. If
all remote entry transmitters are not present during the programming
procedure, the transmitters that are not present during programming will
no longer operate the vehicle.
To program the transmitters yourself:
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not
depressed during this sequence.
• Unlock all doors using the power
door lock/unlock control. Insert a
key and turn the ignition from
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON)
position and cycle between 1
(OFF/LOCK) and 3 (ON) eight
times in rapid succession (within
10 seconds) with the eighth turn
ending in the 3 (ON) position. The locks will cycle to confirm that the
programming mode has been entered.
• Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any
button on a transmitter. The locks will cycle once to confirm that the
remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.)
• Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters.
The locks will cycle once to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed.
• When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn
the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position or wait 20 seconds. Again
the doors will lock/unlock to confirm programming has been
completed.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (ON) position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
4
3
2
1
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
85
The dome lamp control must not be set to the off position for the
illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
last door is closed, even if the dimmer control is on.
Perimeter lighting feature
The perimeter lighting feature illuminates the exterior of the vehicle in
order to provide better visibility to the user while he or she approaches
and enters the vehicle.
The perimeter lighting feature activates when:
• the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position,
• the autolamp sensor determines that it is dark, and
• the user activates an unlock feature, using either the remote keyless
transmitter or the keypad.
The perimeter lighting feature will illuminate the headlamps and parking
lamps for 25 seconds, or until:
• the ignition is turned to any position other than the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position, or
• the user activates a lock feature, using either the remote keyless
transmitter or the keypad.
Enabling/disabling the perimeter lighting feature
Your vehicle comes with the perimeter lighting feature enabled. All
vehicle doors must be closed before beginning the procedure. You must
complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds, or the procedure will have to be
repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait a
minimum of 30 seconds to begin again.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position, then press the
control
three times.
2. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, then press the
control three times.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position; the horn will chirp to
indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated.
4. Within five seconds, press the
control two times. Note: One horn
chirp should be heard, indicating the system has been disabled.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
86
Conversely, a horn chirp followed by a honk will indicate the system is
enabled. Pressing the power door
control two times again will turn
the feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON.
Every two consecutive presses of the
control after successfully
entering the configuration mode will change the enable/disable condition
of the feature.
5. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to exit programming.
Note: After exiting the driver configuration mode, the horn will chirp
once to indicate a feature has been activated/deactivated.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock all vehicle doors.
• unlock only the driver’s door.
• unlock all vehicle doors.
• program/erase the customer keycode.
• enable/disable the autolocking feature.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is marked on
the computer module, and is available from your authorized dealer. You
can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed).
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. After the code is entered, the locks will cycle, confirming that the new
code has been set.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
87
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
• If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Press and release 1 • 2 then,
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 1.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Antiscan feature
The keyless entry keypad is equipped with an anti-theft function called
“antiscan.” The antiscan feature provides a one-minute lockout feature,
where the user is unable to enter the vehicle using the keypad; this
lockout occurs when a valid entry code has not been entered by the user
within 7 attempts (35 consecutive button presses). During the lockout,
the keypad will flash and pressing the controls on the keypad will be
ignored, except for pressing the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls
simultaneously, which will still lock the vehicle.
The antiscan feature will be turned off after:
• one minute, when the antiscan feature times out.
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• the
control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON)
position, or from the 3 (ON) position to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. Note: The driver’s door will unlock and the interior lamps will
illuminate after the factory set 5-digit code or your personal code are
correctly entered.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
88
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock娂 system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
89
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock娂 keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
4
3
2
1
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
90
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3
(ON) position (maintain ignition in
the 3 (ON) position for at least one
second, but no more than ten
seconds).
2. Turn ignition from the 3 (ON)
position back to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition.
3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second
previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition
from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON) position (maintain
ignition in the 3 (ON) position for at least one second but no more than
ten seconds).
4. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) position back to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON) position
(maintain ignition in the 3 (ON) position for at least one second, but no
more than ten seconds). This step will program your new key to a coded
key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
4
3
2
1
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
91
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as
possible behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
92
Push control to lower head restraint.
Using the manual lumbar support
For more lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
front of vehicle.
For less lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
rear of vehicle.
Adjusting the front power seat
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
93
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not hang objects
off seat back or stow objects in map pocket (if equipped) when
a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place objects underneath
the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console (if
equipped). Check Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator for proper Airbag
Status. Refer to Front Passenger Sensing System chapter for additional
details. Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the front or rear portion to tilt
the seat.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
94
Memory seats/mirrors/adjustable pedals
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat,
adjustable pedals, and outside
rearview mirrors to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver’s seat.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat, and adjustable
pedals to the desired position.
Press the SET control. The SET control indicator light will briefly
illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in
Park. A memory position may be programmed at any time.
Heated seats
To operate the heated seats, do the following:
• Push control located on the
instrument panel to set at high
heat.
• Push control again to set at low heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.
The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes.
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
95
The head restraints can be moved
up and down. Lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly or as
close as possible behind your head.
Push control to lower head restraint.
Folding up the rear seats
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into the seatback position.
1. Pull control to release seat
cushion.
2. Rotate seat cushion up until it
locks into vertical storage position.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
96
Returning the seat to seating position
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from
storage position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System姟
The Personal Safety System娂 provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System娂 consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors, and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System姟 work?
The Personal Safety System娂 can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
97
classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors
provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a
crash, the RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either
none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System娂 determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags and
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System娂 to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
98
and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants
are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are
much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in
the front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag when the passenger
seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of the airbag(s) after
a collision.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter.
Front outboard safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
99
Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management
retractors section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System姟 is operational
The Personal Safety System娂 uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System娂 is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System娂 serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
100
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
101
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Energy management retractors
Your vehicle has a safety belt system equipped with energy management
retractors at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
An energy management retractor is a device which pays out webbing in a
controlled manner. This feature is designed to help further reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant.
Safety belt systems equipped with an energy management retractor must
be replaced if they were in use during a frontal collision which resulted
in deployment of the frontal airbags. Refer to the Safety belt
maintenance section in this chapter.
The front and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap
and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard and rear outboard seat
safety belts have two types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
102
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
The front outboard safety belts can also be made to lock manually by
quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. Rear safety belts (if equipped) can
also be made to lock up by pulling quickly on the belt.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
• Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front outboard
and rear seating positions. Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety
Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this
chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
103
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all outboard
seating positions (except the driver position, which does not
have this feature) must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify
that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for
proper function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked
by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt buckle pretensioners at the
driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
Do NOT place objects between the seats, as this could interfere
with the functioning of the pretensioner.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
104
with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt buckle
pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the lap and
shoulder belts during some collisions in such a way that they fit more
snugly against the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of
a collision.
Safety belt usage sensors
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckles are
equipped with sensors that detect if the safety belts are fastened. The
sensors provide information to the Personal Safety System which can
then adapt the airbag deployment or safety belt pretensioner activation
based upon safety belt usage.
The Personal Safety System provides the most benefit to belted
occupants. The system monitors and tailors the air bag
deployment based upon safety belt usage. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt will increase your risk of injury.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
105
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the driver and right
front passenger. Adjust the height of
the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height
of the shoulder belt, push the
button and slide the height adjuster
up. Pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt
height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of
your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt and increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
106
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder姞
The BeltMinder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltMinder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
BeltMinder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the BeltMinder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the BeltMinder威
feature.
When the BeltMinder威 feature is activated, the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts
are buckled.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
107
The BeltMinder威 feature uses two different warning chimes. During the
first minute of activation, the warning chime will sound once every
second. The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second
while the system is activated.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled...
The BeltMinder威 feature will not
activate.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph and
1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has
been turned to ON...
The BeltMinder威 feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for 6
seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until the
safety belts are buckled.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt
becomes unbuckled for
approximately 1 minute while
the vehicle is traveling at
least 6 mph and 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been
turned to ON...
The BeltMinder威 feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for 6
seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until the
safety belts are buckled.
The BeltMinder威 feature is
activated and the vehicle
speed is less than 3 mph...
The BeltMinder威 feature is suspended -
the safety belt warning light remains
illuminated, but the warning chime does
not sound. This time does not count
towards the 5-minute expiration time.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
108
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare
events”
36700 crashes occur every day. The more we
drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events,
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3of4fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.
“Belts are
uncomfortable”
We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If
you are uncomfortable - try different positions for
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as possible; this can
improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder威
reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t
work”
Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,
and by 60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my
clothes”
Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
unbelted.
“The people I’m
with don’t wear
belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when used with
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be
thrown clear”
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate
into the buckle to avoid the BeltMinder威 chime. To do so may
adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
109
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the BeltMinder威 feature for that seating position, the BeltMinder娂 is
disabled for the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder威 feature will
re-enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and
remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given
for the one time disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
While the design allows you to deactivate your BeltMinder威,this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the
BeltMinder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
BeltMinder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state. (Step 3 must be
completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns
off.)
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
110
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3
seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there isa8inch(20
cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
111
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
1. Airbag cover
The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in
conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:
• driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the
inflators and airbags).
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and
diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off indicator light.
The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal
Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the
Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
112
crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the
Personal Safety System section in this chapter.
Important SRS precautions
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should
always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag (SRS)
is provided.
Always transport children
12 years old and under in
the back seat if your vehicle has a
back seat. Rear facing infant seats
should NEVER be placed in the
front seats. This is because the
back of the infant seat is too close
to the inflating airbag and the risk
of a fatal injury to the infant when
the airbag inflates is substantial.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag cover.
Never place your arms or feet over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
113
Do not put anything on or
over the airbag cover (1).
Placing objects on or over the
airbag cover may cause those
objects to be thrown by the airbag
into your face and torso or may
result in a failure of the airbag to
inflate properly, both of which
could result in serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your authorized
dealer.
The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
114
Children and airbags
For additional important safety
information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat. Failure to
follow these instructions may
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
115
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag cover as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again
and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
116
• The readiness lights will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness lights will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
117
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. The indicator lamp is
located in the center stack of the instrument panel just above the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
118
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Passenger
Airbag
Empty seat Unlit Disabled
Small child in child safety
seat or booster
Lit Disabled
Small child with safety
belt buckled or unbuckled
Lit Disabled
Adult Unlit Enabled
Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
119
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Passenger
Airbag
Small (i.e. 3 ring binder, small
purse, bottled water)
Unlit Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy briefcase,
fully packed luggage)
Lit Disabled
Empty seat, or small to medium
object with safety belt buckled
Lit Disabled
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center seating position.
An out of position front center occupant could affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
120
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury in a crash.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
121
bend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
122
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
123
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt
does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
124
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the
safety seat, with the tongue
between the child seat and the
release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode passenger side front and rear seating positions (if
equipped).
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
lb (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 lb (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb (36 kg) using an upper torso
harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
125
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
126
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
127
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the
seatback or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the
seat cushion.
The rear seat has three straps along the top of the seatback that
function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
128
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Rear seat tether strap attachment
There are three loops of webbing
just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear
window). These loops are to be
used as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child
safety seat tether straps. For
example, the center loop can be
used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat
and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
129
1. Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and through the loop
directly behind the child seat.
2. Route the tether strap behind the
head restraint supports to a loop
behind an adjacent seating position,
and hook the strap hook onto the
loop. If using the driver’s side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt
mounting for the center seat.
• Always put the tether strap
through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post will
hold the child seat tightly, but the head restraint post is not strong
enough to hold the child seat during a collision.
3. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
130
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat installation
at the following seating positions:
The anchors on both sides of the center of the rear seat are provided for
child seats at the outboard seats, and are further apart than the pairs of
lower anchors for child seat installation at other seats. DO NOT install
child seats with LATCH attachments (rigid or mounted on belt webbing)
to the lower anchors at the center rear seat. If you install a child seat at
the center rear position, use the vehicle belt and the top tether anchor.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child
safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the seat between the
cushion and seat back. The LATCH
anchors are below the locator
buttons on the seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
131
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
132
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
133
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow
you to select different drive modes
as necessary. Information on
transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the
Driving chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
134
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
135
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
136
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
137
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
138
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire
Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi (4.15
bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire
Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
139
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
140
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these
labels then you should consult your Ford dealer. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized
dealer.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
141
When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheel
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
142
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
143
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
144
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
145
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
146
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
147
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
148
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
149
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
150
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
151
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Possible cause Customer Action Required
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly
inflated; refer to Inflating
your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to
the manufacturer’s
recommended inflation
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for
at least two minutes over 20
mph (32 km/h) before the light
will turn OFF.
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on
the vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the light
remains ON, have the system
inspected by your authorized
dealer.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
152
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Possible cause Customer Action Required
Flashing Warning
Light
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
of how the system functions
under these conditions, refer to
When your temporary spare
tire is installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the TPMS
warning light is still ON, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6° C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
153
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The original equipment tires on your vehicle have an all-weather tread
design to provide traction, handling, and braking performance in
year-round driving. You may install snow tires for improved traction
when driving in areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving
conditions.
If you choose to install snow tires on your vehicle, they must be the
same size, construction, and load range as the original tires listed on the
tire placard, and they must be installed on all four wheels. Mixing tires of
different size or construction on your vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle’s handling and braking, and may lead to loss of vehicle control.
Do not use snow chains or cables on this vehicle as they may
cause damage to your vehicle which may lead to loss of vehicle
control.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
154
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
155
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
156
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
157
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
158
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
(5 x 220) – (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (5
x 99 kg) — (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 — 495 — 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
159
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x
100) = 1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (12 x 45 kg) = 635 —
198 — 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (9
x 45 kg) = 635 — 198 — 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II, III or IV trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts. A 7–pin
connector is provided at the vehicle’s hitch.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a heavy-duty trailer towing package,
the maximum weight your vehicle can tow is limited to 5,000 lb. (2,268
kg)
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
160
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully periodically during, and after any towing operation.
Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage
to your vehicle and personal injury.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
4x2 (139” wheelbase)
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L 3.73 14500 (6577) 8900 (4037)
4x2 (151” wheelbase)
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L 3.73 14500 (6577) 8800 (3992)
4x4 (139” wheelbase)
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L 3.73 14500 (6577) 8600 (3901)
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
161
4x4 (151” wheelbase)
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L 3.73 14500 (6577) 8500 (3856)
Trailer frontal area considerations:
• Not to exceed towing vehicle frontal area without Class IV trailer
towing package
• Not to exceed 60 square feet (5.52 square meters) with Class IV
trailer towing package
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight distributing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within
1
⁄
2
” (13 mm) of the reference point.
After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in
Step 2.
Note: Adjusting a weight distributing hitch so the rear bumper of the
vehicle is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the
weight distributing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
162
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
Note: Trailer brakes are required for trailers over 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a 5,000
lb. (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle
starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
163
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission in the Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
164
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An
example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission and 4x4 vehicles
equipped with an electronic-shift transfer case:
• Release the parking brake.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF position.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).
• Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the front (4x4 only) and rear
driveshafts. Ford recommends the driveshafts be removed/installed only
by your authorized.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the
driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case
components.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
165
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. OFF/LOCK, locks the steering
wheel, automatic transmission
gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
Note: The ignition key cannot be
removed from the ignition unless
the gearshift lever is securely
latched in P (Park).
2. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running.
3. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
166
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. If the vehicle is operated in a
heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions, the engine air induction
may become partially clogged with snow and/or ice. If this occurs the
engine may experience a significant reduction in power output. At the
earliest opportunity, clear all snow and/or ice away from the air induction
inlet. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the
higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
167
4. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
5. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely.
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press and hold the accelerator to the floor and try again;
this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the
engine is flooded with fuel.
BRAKE
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
168
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
P!
BRAKE
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
169
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), press
the parking brake pedal down until
the pedal stops.
ABS
P!
BRAKE
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
170
The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate and will remain
illuminated until the parking brake
is released.
To release, pull the lever (2).
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
TRACTION CONTROL姟 (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control娂 system. This
system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle,
especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads
and gravel roads. The system will allow your vehicle to make better use
of available traction in these conditions.
During Traction Control娂 operation,
the traction control active light will
illuminate and the engine will not
“rev-up” when you push further on
the accelerator. This is normal
system behavior and should be no
reason for concern.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of a Traction Control娂
event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you
experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
The Traction Control娂 switch,
located on the center console, has
an indicator light that illuminates
when the system is off. The Traction
Control娂 system will automatically
turn on every time the ignition is
turned off and on. The Traction
Control娂 system should normally be
left on.
P!
BRAKE
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
171
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the Traction Control娂 system off. This may allow
excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful
“rocking” maneuver.
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate, the Traction Control娂 button will not turn the system on or
off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
172
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock - floor-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a fuse
has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer
to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
173
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to LOCK, then remove the
key.
2. Open the center console bin.
Using a screwdriver, carefully pry off
the console finish panel surrounding
the shifter mechanism by inserting a
screwdriver into the latch slot as
shown.
3. Remove console finish panel
assembly to expose the inside of the
gearshift.
4. Press and hold the white button
located along side the shifter
housing assembly (as shown in the
illustration). Press the gearshift
lever release on the shifter knob and
move the gearshift lever back to N
(Neutral) (two places rearward from
P [Park]).
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
174
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
Your vehicle’s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift
strategy that ensures maximum heater performance during cold weather
operation.
When ambient temperature is 23°F (–5°C) or below and the engine
coolant temperature is below 100°F (38°C), light throttle upshifts may be
slightly delayed. Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 160°F
(71°C) the normal shift strategy will resume. This is normal operation
and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission.
If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine
coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature,
or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function
normally, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
• Release the parking brake.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
175
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the gearshift bezel.
The transmission control indicator
(TCIL) will illuminate on the
instrument cluster.
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
O/D
OFF
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
176
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to D (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the D
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
177
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in
reverse and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
178
The RSS detects obstacles up to 6
feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS may have reduced
performance or an increased chance
of false detection if the tailgate is
not locked and in the upright position. If the tailgate is down, the RSS
tone may be heard intermittently or continuously. The tone may also be
heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gearshift lever is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
An RSS control allows the driver to
turn the RSS on and off. To turn the
RSS off, the ignition must be ON,
and the gear selector in R
(Reverse). An indicator light on the
control will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator
light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failure
in the RSS. The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is
pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
179
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
4WD system will not engage past 4WD High. This is normal and
should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD
Low) for proper operation.
System indicator lights
• 4X4 HI - Momentarily illuminates
when the engine is started.
Illuminates when 4H is selected.
• 4X4 LOW – Momentarily
illuminates when the engine is
started. Illuminates when 4L is
selected.
Using the electronic shift 4WD system
2H (2WD High) - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high
speeds.
4H (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.
4x4 HI
4x4
LOW
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
180
4L (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low)
will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from
4L (4WD Low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High)
• Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at any forward speed up to
55 mph (88 km/h).
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
• If shifting into 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete.
• If shifting out of 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
181
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
182
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
183
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park). Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake
fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Operation section earlier in this
chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter. You should become
thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
184
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
185
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
Apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
186
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS).
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
187
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
SNOWPLOWING
Your vehicle is not recommended for snowplowing. Ford makes no
representation as to the suitability of your vehicle for snowplowing, in
particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle weight limits,
airbag (SRS) deployment sensitivity, vehicle crash integrity, or
powertrain durability. The Snowplow Package Option is not available.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
188
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $100 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
189
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
190
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
191
This switch is located in the front
passenger’s footwell, behind the kick
panel access cover, to the left of the
fuse box. The access cover needs to
be removed to reset the fuel pump
shut-off switch.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
15
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
192
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — — —
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue — Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural — Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel. Remove the trim panel and fuse box cover to access the fuses.
To remove the fuse box cover, place
a finger behind the PULL tab and
your thumb above the PULL tab as
shown in the illustration, then pull
the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
193
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box and Auxiliary Relay Box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
1 10A* Run/Accessory - Wipers,
Instrument cluster
2 20A* Stop/Turn lamps, Brake on/off
switch, Hazard flashers
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
194
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
3 7.5A* Power mirrors, Memory seats and
pedals, Driver power seat
4 10A* DVD battery power, Power fold
mirror
5 7.5A* Keep alive memory for Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and
climate control module
6 15A* Parklamps, BSM, Instrument
panel illumination
7 5A* Radio (start signal)
8 10A* Heated mirrors, Switch indicator
9 20A* Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors
10 20A* Trailer tow back-up lamps relay
(PCB1), Trailer tow parklamp
relay (R201)
11 10A* A/C clutch, 4x4 solenoid
12 5A* PCM relay coil
13 10A* Climate control module power,
Flasher relay
14 10A* Back-up lamp and Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) relay coil,
A/C pressure switch, Redundant
speed control switch, Heated PCV,
Trailer tow back-up lamps relay
coil, ABS, Reverse park aid, EC
mirror, Navigation radio (reverse
input)
15 5A* Overdrive cancel, Cluster,
Traction control switch
16 10A* Brake-shift interlock solenoid
17 15A* Fog lamp relay (R202)
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
195
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
18 10A* Run/Start feed - Overhead power
point, Electrochromatic mirror,
Heated seats, BSM, Compass, RSS
(Reverse Sensing System)
19 10A* Restraints (Air bag module), OCS
20 10A* Battery feed for overhead power
point
21 15A* Cluster keep alive power
22 10A* Delayed accessory power for
audio, power door lock switch and
moon roof switch illumination
23 10A* RH low beam headlamp
24 15A* Battery saver power for demand
lamps
25 10A* LH low beam headlamp
26 20A* Horn relay (PCB3), Horn power
27 5A* Passenger Air bag Deactivation
(PAD) warning lamp, Cluster RUN
/START power
28 5A* SecuriLock transceiver (PATS)
29 15A* PCM 4x4 power
30 15A* PCM 4x4 power
31 20A* Radio power, Satellite radio
module
32 15A* Vapor Management Valve (VMV),
A/C clutch relay, Canister vent,
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen
(HEGO) sensors #11 and #21,
CMCV, Mass Air Flow (MAF)
sensor, VCT, Electronic fan clutch
33 15A* Shift solenoid, CMS #12 and #22
34 15A* Fuel injectors and PCM power
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
196
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
35 20A* Instrument cluster high beam
indicator, High beam headlamps
36 10A* Trailer tow right turn/stop lamps
37 20A* Rear power point, Center console
power point
38 25A* Subwoofer power
39 20A* Instrument panel power point
40 20A* Low beam headlamps, DRL
41 20A* Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector
power
42 10A* Trailer tow left turn/stop lamps
101 30A** Starter solenoid
102 20A** Ignition switch feed
103 20A** ABS valves
104 — Not used
105 30A** Electric trailer brakes
106 30A** Trailer tow battery charge
107 30A** Power door locks (BSM)
108 30A** Passenger power seat
109 30A** Driver power seat, Adjustable
pedals, Memory module (pedals,
seat, mirror)
110 — Not used
111 30A** 4x4 relays
112 40A** ABS pump power
113 30A** Wipers and washer pump
114 40A** Heated backlite, Heated mirror
power
115 20A** Moon roof
116 30A** Blower motor
117 — Not used
118 30A** Heated seats
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
197
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
401 30A Circuit
breaker
Delayed accessory power: Power
windows, Moon roof, Power
sliding backlite
R01 Full ISO relay Starter solenoid
R02 Full ISO relay Accessory delay
R03 Full ISO relay Hi-beam headlamps
R04 Full ISO relay Heated backlite
R05 Full ISO relay Trailer tow battery charge
R06 Full ISO relay Blower motor
R201 Half ISO relay Trailer tow park lamps
R202 Half ISO relay Fog lamps
R203 Half ISO relay PCM
* Mini fuses ** Cartridge fuses
Auxiliary relay box
The relay box is located in the engine compartment on the left fender.
• With Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) and 4x4 options
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
198
• Without Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) and 4x4 options
The relays are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Description
F03 5A Clockspring illumination
R01 Full ISO
Relay
4x4 CCW
R02 Full ISO
Relay
4x4 CW
R03
1
⁄
2
ISO
Relay
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) high beam
disable
R201 Relay DRL
R202 Relay A/C clutch
D01 Diode A/C clutch
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires. The use of tire
sealants may also damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
and should not be used.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
199
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If
the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
200
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
For vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehicle
be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If
4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph (16
km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
201
Tool Location
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack, jack handle and lug nut
wrench
Under the rear seat on the
passenger side
The wing nut must be removed and the jack screw turned
counterclockwise to release pressure before the jack can be removed
from the holder.
Removing the spare tire
1. Use the ignition key to remove
the lock cylinder from the access
hole of the bumper to allow access
to the guide tube. Assemble the jack
handle as shown in the illustration.
2. Fully insert the jack handle
through the bumper hole and into
the guide tube through the access
hole in the rear bumper.
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground,
the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack.
4. Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
202
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Refer to the instruction sheet (located with the jack) for detailed tire
change instructions.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)
and turn engine OFF.
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
4. Obtain the spare tire and jack
from their storage locations.
5. Use the tip of the lug wrench to
remove any wheel trim.
6. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
7. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground.
BRAKE
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
203
When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle
from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake
is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. If the vehicle slips
off the jack, someone could be seriously injured.
• Front
Note: Use the frame rail as the jacking location point, NOT the control
arm.
• Rear
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
204
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown (Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification):
12. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire.
13. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
14. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
205
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
M14 x 2.0 150 200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
JUMP STARTING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
206
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
–
+
–
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
207
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
208
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
+
–
+
–
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
209
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
210
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
211
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do
not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
212
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized dealer
for warranty repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your
selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued
satisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special
training and/or equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair
after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Lincoln Mercury Customer
Relationship Center at 1-800-521-4140.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
213
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to
contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S. only).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
214
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of
a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
215
achieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined on
the front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concern
has not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern
through mediation. Mediation is a process through which a
representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options
for settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customers
with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration
process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after
the hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept
it. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must
abide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided in
your favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE program
will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a
timely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are
usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for your
name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a Customer
Claim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicle
ownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Upon
receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1–800–955–5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
216
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative
to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement
have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to
eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing
Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.
There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible
combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
217
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
218
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
219
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• Use Custom Brite Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
220
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your
vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s
door jamb) to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
EXTERIOR CHROME
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• Use Custom Brite Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
221
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• 5.4L engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
222
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines (if
equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
223
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the airbag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
LEATHER SEATS
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11-A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
224
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
225
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
226
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services
are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
227
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located on the front bumper under the grill.
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
228
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
5.4L V8
1. Battery
2. Transmission fluid dipstick
3. Air filter assembly
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
229
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
230
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
231
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
• If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
232
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
233
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
234
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
235
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
L
E
A
D
RETURN
RECYCLE
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
236
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
237
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an
equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS-M99B37-B6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Ford
specification WSS-M97B44-D, with the factory-filled coolant.
Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any
orange-colored extended life product with your factory filled coolant
can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the “COLD FILL
RANGE”. Follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
238
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE”.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Turn cap until click is
heard/felt to ensure it is tightly installed.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking engine coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
239
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
240
• The message center will indicate a system warning, refer to Message
Center in the Driver Controls chapter.
• The Service engine soon indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
241
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
242
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
243
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 turn to remove it.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 turn until it clicks at least once.
“CHECK FUEL CAP” will display in the message center when the fuel
filler cap is not properly installed. Proper fuel filler cap installation is
checked automatically as the vehicle is driven, but not until after some
fuel is used (fuel gauge drops below full). Once the fuel filler cap is
properly secured, “CHECK FUEL CAP” will turn off after a short period
of driving.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
244
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethyl alcohol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels
that are blended with a maximum of 85% ethyl alcohol. The use of
leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not
use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular grade fuel. We recommend
using regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic
additives, but fuels free of such additives may be available; check with
your local fuel dealer.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
245
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding one gallon of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If
the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than one gallon
may be required.
• The
indicator may come on. For more information on the “check
engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights
and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
246
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading may result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than three automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
247
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
248
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed
(if equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
249
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the
indicator, charging system warning light or the
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not
working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
250
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water – the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
indicator should stay off
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
If the
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving
with the
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
251
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned
out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission
control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle
is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the
indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may
need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
description in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the
indicator blinks
eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the
indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use MERCON威 ATF.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
252
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
253
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30
km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
254
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
255
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for
maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with
universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be
necessary.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
256
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release two retainer clamps.
2. Pull air filter tray assembly out
toward front of vehicle and lift air
filter element up and out of housing.
The air filter box needs to be free of any debris before installing a new
air filter.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
257
3. Install a new air filter element
into the tray assembly.
4. Return air filter tray to original
position by pressing firmly on the
handle until all rearward movement
stops and secure the two clamps.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 5.4L 3V V8 engine
Air filter element FA-1754
Battery BXT-65-650
Fuel filter FG-986B
Oil filter FL-820-S
PCV valve
1
Spark plugs
2
1
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
258
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Brake fluid
Fill to line on
reservoir
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1 or PM-1-C /
ESA-M6C25-A or
WSS-M6C62-A
Seat tracks — Multi-Purpose Grease
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
Hinges, latches, striker
plates, fuel filler door
hinge and door check
arm
—
Motorcraft Silicone
Brake Caliper Grease
and Dielectric
Compound
XG-3-A /
ESE-M1C171-A
Transmission
/steering/parking brake
linkages and pivots and
brake pedal shaft
—
Premium Long-Life
Grease
XG-1-C /
ESA-M1C75-B
Lock cylinders —
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Engine oil 7.0 quarts (6.6L)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend
Motor Oil
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
1
XO-5W20-QSP (US)
CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C930-A with API
Certification Mark
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
259
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Engine coolant
21.2 quarts
(20.0L)
Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
2
VC-7-B /
WSS-M97B51-A1
Cooling system stop
leak pellets
—
Motorcraft Cooling
System Stop Leak Pellets
VC-6 /
WSS-M99B37-B6
Front axle (4X4) fluid 3.7 pints (2.0L)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Rear axle fluid– 9.75
inch
3
5.5 pints (2.6L)
4
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Automatic transmission
fluid (4R75E)
13.9 quarts
(13.2L)
5
Motorcraft MERCON威V
ATF
6
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威V
Power steering fluid
Fill to between
MIN and MAX
lines on reservoir
Motorcraft MERCON威
ATF
XT-2-QDX /
MERCON威
Transfer case fluid
(4X4)
2.0 quarts (1.9L)
7
Windshield washer fluid 4.25 quarts (4.0L)
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
Fuel tank
(5.5’ box)
30 gallons
(113.6L)
——
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
260
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Fuel tank
(6.5’ box)
27 gallons
(102.2L) Standard
35.7 gallons
(135.1L) Optional
——
1
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated
for life. These lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service
is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be
changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.
4
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to 1/4-9/16 inch (6-14 mm) below the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier or equivalent meeting Ford specification
EST-M2C118-A, for complete fill of 9.75 inch Traction-Lok axles.
5
Approximate dry fill capacity including transmission fluid cooling system, actual refill capacities
will vary based on vehicle application and transmission fluid cooling system (i.e. coolers size,
cooling lines. auxiliary cooler capacities). The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should
be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
6
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 V should only use MERCON威 V fluid or fluid that
is specified dual usage MERCON威/ MERCON威 V. Use of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause transmission damage. Refer to scheduled maintenance information to determine
the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause
transmission damage.
7
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transfer case to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
261
ENGINE DATA
Engine 5.4L V8 engine
Cubic inches 330
Required fuel 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap
1
0.040–0.050 inch (1.02–1.28mm)
Compression ratio 9.85:1
1
The spark plug gap can not be adjusted.
Engine drivebelt routing
• 5.4L V8 Engine
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
262
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
263
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Description Code
Four-speed automatic (4R75E) Q
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
264
GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Lincoln Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by a dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 4 years or 50,000 miles (80,000
km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy
of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Chrome exhaust tips
Deflectors
Exterior trim
Fender flares
Grille inserts
Running boards
Splash guards
Step bars
Tonneau covers
Wheels
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
265
Interior style
Consoles
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Bedliners and bedmats
Cargo organization and management
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
Mobile-ease娂 hands-free communication system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
•
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician.
•
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
266
A
Accessory delay ..........................55
Air cleaner filter ...............257–258
Air conditioning ..........................34
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ................................112–113
and child safety seats ............115
description ..............................113
disposal ....................................117
driver airbag ....................113, 115
indicator light .........................116
operation .........................113, 115
passenger airbag .............113, 115
Ambulance packages ....................7
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................236
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................169–170
Anti-theft system ........................89
arming the system ....................90
Audio system (see Radio) .........20
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................175
fluid, adding ............................253
fluid, checking ........................253
fluid, refill capacities ..............259
fluid, specification ..................259
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................26
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........259
refill capacities ........................259
traction lok ..............................172
B
Battery .......................................234
acid, treating emergencies .....234
jumping a disabled battery ....206
maintenance-free ....................234
replacement, specifications ...258
servicing ..................................234
BeltMinder威 ...............................107
deactivating/activating the
BeltMinder威 ............................110
Brakes ........................................169
anti-lock ...........................169–170
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................170
fluid, checking and adding ....253
fluid, refill capacities ..............259
fluid, specifications .................259
lubricant specifications ..........259
parking ....................................170
shift interlock ..........................173
Bulbs ............................................42
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....259
Cargo cage ...................................76
Cell phone use ..............................7
Changing a tire .........................199
Child safety restraints ..............121
child safety belts ....................121
Child safety seats ......................124
attaching with tether straps ..128
in front seat ............................126
in rear seat ..............................126
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............222
instrument panel ....................223
interior .....................................224
interior trim ............................224
plastic parts ............................222
safety belts ..............................224
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
267
washing ....................................220
waxing .....................................220
wheels ......................................221
wiper blades ............................223
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............34
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .............................21
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................68
Console ........................................49
overhead ..............................49–50
Controls
power seat .................................93
steering column ........................60
Coolant
checking and adding ..............236
refill capacities ................239, 259
specifications ..........................259
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................58
Customer Assistance ................189
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................217
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................218
Getting roadside assistance ...189
Getting the service you
need .........................................213
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................218
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................216
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................39
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................253
engine oil .................................231
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................256
Driving under special
conditions ..................177, 183, 185
sand .........................................184
snow and ice ...........................186
through water .................185, 188
DVD system .................................33
E
Electronic message center .........66
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................206
Emergency Flashers .................191
Emission control system ..........250
Engine ........................................262
cleaning ...................................222
coolant .....................................236
fail-safe cooling .......................240
idle speed control ...................234
lubrication specifications .......259
refill capacities ........................259
service points ..........................229
starting after a collision .........191
Engine block heater .................169
Engine oil ..................................231
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................231
checking and adding ..............231
dipstick ....................................231
filter, specifications ........233, 258
recommendations ...................233
refill capacities ........................259
specifications ..........................259
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
268
Exhaust fumes ..........................169
F
Fail safe cooling ........................240
Fluid capacities .........................259
Foglamps .....................................38
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......180
driving off road .......................181
electronic shift ........................180
indicator light .........................180
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................173
Fuel ............................................242
calculating fuel
economy ............................69, 246
cap ...........................................244
capacity ...................................259
choosing the right fuel ...........245
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................249
detergent in fuel .....................246
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................242, 244, 247
filter, specifications ........241, 258
fuel pump shut-off switch .....191
improving fuel economy ........246
octane rating ...................245, 262
quality ......................................245
running out of fuel .................246
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................242
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......191
Fuses ..................................192–193
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............244
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................246
Gauges .........................................13
H
Hazard flashers .........................191
Head restraints .....................92, 95
Headlamps ...................................38
aiming ........................................40
autolamp system .......................38
bulb specifications ....................43
daytime running lights .............39
flash to pass ..............................39
high beam .................................39
replacing bulbs .........................43
turning on and off ....................38
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .......................................34
Homelink wireless control
system ..........................................62
Hood ..........................................228
How to get going ........................16
I
Ignition ...............................166, 262
Illuminated visor mirror .............49
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................124
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................252
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................223
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................40
J
Jack ............................................199
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
269
positioning ...............................199
storage .............................199, 201
Jump-starting your vehicle ......206
K
Keyless entry system .................87
autolock .....................................78
keypad .......................................87
locking and unlocking doors ....88
programming entry code .........87
Keys .......................................78, 90
positions of the ignition .........166
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................38
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................43
daytime running light ...............39
fog lamps ...................................38
headlamps .................................38
headlamps, flash to pass ..........39
instrument panel, dimming .....40
interior lamps ...........................42
replacing bulbs ...................43, 47
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................41
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........170
Load limits .................................154
Loading instructions .................160
Locks
autolock .....................................78
childproof ..................................80
doors ..........................................78
Lubricant specifications ...........259
Lug nuts ....................................206
Lumbar support, seats ...............93
M
Message center .....................66–67
english/metric button ...............71
system check button ................70
warning messages .....................72
Mirrors .........................................56
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................55
fold away ...................................56
heated ........................................57
programmable memory ......83, 95
side view mirrors (power) .......56
signal .........................................57
Moon roof ....................................61
Motorcraft parts ........225, 241, 258
N
Navigation system .......................33
O
Octane rating ............................245
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................231
P
Parking brake ............................170
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....258
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor ...................98
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................193
Power door locks ........................78
Power mirrors .............................56
Power point .................................52
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
270
Power steering ..........................172
fluid, checking and adding ....252
fluid, refill capacity ................259
fluid, specifications .................259
Power Windows ...........................53
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................173
R
Radio ............................................20
Relays ........................................192
Remote entry system ...........80–81
illuminated entry ......................85
locking/unlocking doors .....81–82
panic alarm ...............................83
replacement/additional
transmitters ...............................84
replacing the batteries .............83
Reverse sensing system ...........178
Roadside assistance ..................189
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........111
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ....97, 100, 102–104, 106
Safety defects, reporting ..........219
Safety
restraints .....97, 100, 102–104, 106
BeltMinder威 ............................107
BeltMinder威,
deactivating/activating ...........110
extension assembly ................111
for adults .........................102–104
for children .....................120–121
Occupant Classification
Sensor ........................................98
safety belt maintenance .........111
warning light and
chime ...............................106–107
Safety seats for children ..........124
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................263
Satellite Radio Information ........30
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............97
Seats ............................................92
child safety seats ....................124
heated ..................................34, 95
memory seat .......................83, 95
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ....................................89–90
Servicing your vehicle ..............227
Setting the clock
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................21
Snowplowing .........................7, 188
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........201
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................258, 262
Special notice
ambulance conversions ..............7
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................259
Speed control ..............................58
Starting your vehicle ........166–168
jump starting ..........................206
Steering wheel
controls ......................................60
tilting .........................................48
T
Tailgate ..................................75–76
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
271
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....150
Tires ...........................135–136, 199
alignment ................................143
care ..........................................139
changing ..................199, 201–202
checking the pressure ............139
inflating ...................................137
label .........................................149
replacing ..................................141
rotating ....................................143
safety practices .......................142
sidewall information ...............144
snow tires and chains ............154
spare tire .................................200
terminology .............................136
tire grades ...............................136
treadwear ........................135, 140
Towing .......................................160
recreational towing .................165
trailer towing ..........................160
Traction control ........................171
Traction-lok rear axle ...............172
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................256
Transmission .............................173
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....173
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................253
fluid, refill capacities ..............259
lubricant specifications ..........259
Turn signal ..................................41
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................263
Vehicle loading ..........................154
Ventilating your vehicle ...........169
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................230
Water, Driving through .............188
Windows
power .........................................53
power down back window .......54
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................48
checking and adding fluid .....230
replacing wiper blades ...........230
2007 Mark LT (mlt)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
272
